Product
The Product table contains one row for each goods or service.
You can also use this table to define, for example, standard texts and group discounts to be filled in on an order line when typing the pseudo product no.
There is no reference field to default suppliers in the Product table. You enter current suppliers of the product by using the Delivery alternative table. You can also define default suppliers per warehouse in the Stock balance table. To enter prices for a product, you use the Price- and discount matrix table. If you want to differentiate between prices of special groups of products, you can divide products into product price groups.
You can use the Alternative product table to define which alternatives are available if the product is sold out or no longer in production. If you want to have the product name printed on order documents in the customer's language, you can use the Product description table and insert the product name in various language numbers.
The Processing method in the Processing menu in Product table has a large number of options that you can use to control how Business NXT processes each product or underlying structure goods.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Database | Company | This table is in the company databases. |
| SQL name | Prod | The table name in the database. |
| API identifier | product | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Table no. | 114 | The table number in the data model. |
The following fields exist in this table:
Area
The area of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | AreaU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | area | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5904 |
Buyer
The employee who is responsible for purchasing the product.
The Empl. no. is a unique number identifying one specific Employee.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Empl. no. | Integer |
| SQL name | Buyer | The database field name. |
| API identifier | buyer | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3075 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Associate | Buyer |
|
Change time in ms
The time when changes were made in milliseconds.
Used in the integration between Zpider and Business NXT. With this field, the changes you make in Business NXT are updated in Zpider immediately.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | No. | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | ChTmms | The database field name. |
| API identifier | changeTimeInMs | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 16616 |
Cost price addition %
The percentage by which the net purchase price after line discounts must increase to match the cost price. Consignment costs are also included in the cost prices. This is only applicable for purchase orders.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Percent | Decimal |
| SQL name | CstPrAdd | The database field name. |
| API identifier | costPriceAdditionPercent | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4931 |
Customs stat. no.
An information field that can be used on consignment notes.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | String of length 12 | Text (12) |
| SQL name | CusStNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | customsStatisticsNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2599 |
Default unit
The unit suggested when the product is added to an order line.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | Yes | This field is visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Unit | Integer |
| SQL name | StSaleUn | The database field name. |
| API identifier | defaultSalesUnits | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2584 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Unit | Unit |
|
Density
The density of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | DensU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | density | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6261 |
Description
The description of Product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | Yes | This field is visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Description | Text (60) |
| SQL name | Descr | The database field name. |
| API identifier | description | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2579 |
EAN item no.
The international article number assigned to the product.
An EAN/GTIN item number has either 8 or 13 digits. The 8-digit version is used for small packages. EAN/GTIN codes with 13 digits are unique all over the world, and the 2 or 3 first digits identify the country where the code was assigned.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | EAN code | Text (40) |
| SQL name | EANItmNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | eanItemNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 7562 |
EU goods stat. no.
The number identifying type of product which makes it possible to gather unified data on the same type of product throughout the EU. All deliveries made and received within the EU during the reporting period must be reported in the INTRASTAT declarations.
This text type domain can hold 10 digits in order to comply with EU regulations.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | EU goods stat. no. | Integer |
| SQL name | EUStatNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | euGoodsStatisticsNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5024 |
Exchange quantity
How much of the raw material is required per unit of the finished product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | ExQty | The database field name. |
| API identifier | exchangeQuantity | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4568 |
Factor 3
Instead of entering a quantity directly in the Order line table, you can have it calculated as the difference between the To and From fields or as the product of them and the Factor 3 field.
When the quantity is calculated as the difference between the To and From fields, it can be expressed as a quantity, time or date, depending on the quantity format selected in the Proc. method 1 field in the Order line table. If the Factor 3 field does not have any value in the Order line table, the value in this field will be imported.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | Factor3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | factor3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5048 |
Free 1
Additional numeric information about the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | Free1 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | free1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11261 |
Free 2
Additional numeric information about the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | Free2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | free2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11262 |
Free 3
Additional numeric information about the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | Free3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | free3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11263 |
Free 4
Additional numeric information about the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | Free4 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | free4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11264 |
From
Used in conjunction with the To field for calculating the quantity.
When the quantity is calculated as the difference between to and from, it can be expressed as a quantity, time, date or factor, depending on the quantity format selected on the Editing page in the Proc. method 1 field in the Order line table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | FrNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | from | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5046 |
Gr. 1
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 1 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4303 |
Gr. 2
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 2 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4304 |
Gr. 3
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 3 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4305 |
Gr. 4
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 4 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr4 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4306 |
Gr. 5
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 5 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr5 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group5 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4307 |
Gr. 6
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 6 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr6 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group6 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4308 |
Gr. 7
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 7 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr7 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group7 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6061 |
Gr. 8
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 8 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr8 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group8 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6062 |
Gr. 9
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 9 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr9 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group9 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6063 |
Gr. 10
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 10 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr10 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group10 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6064 |
Gr. 11
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 11 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr11 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group11 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6065 |
Gr. 12
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product grouping 12 | Integer |
| SQL name | Gr12 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | group12 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6066 |
Gross weight
The sum of values in the Net weight and Tare fields.
Prices and discounts can be specified not only on the basis of the ordinary quantity field but also this field.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| Memory field | Yes | The value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database. |
| API identifier | grossWeight | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5900 |
Group sep.
Used to restrict the extent of group discounts or group totals.
On the Misc. page in the Proc. method 1 field you can configure a product to be used as a Group discount or Group total. When using several group discount on an order, those can be linked into one. If they is to be handled separately you can add a value in this field.
Group discounts and totals are calculated by the above order lines up to any initial group separator and can be combined in an unlimited number of levels. This field indicates the beginning of the group.
When you use groups inside other groups without a group separator in between, you produce chain discounts/additions of discounts/additions granted previously.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Group sep. | Integer |
| SQL name | GrSep | The database field name. |
| API identifier | groupSeparators | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5010 |
Height
The height of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | HgtU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | height | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5903 |
Incm. doc. no.
The source of the most recent update from the supplier.
The value is set automatically when updating product data from Incoming product data. The field contains a lookup to the Incoming document table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | No. | Integer |
| SQL name | InDocNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | incomingDocumentNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 18459 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Incoming document | IncomingDocument |
|
Inf. 1
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3535 |
Inf. 2
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3536 |
Inf. 3
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3537 |
Inf. 4
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf4 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3538 |
Inf. 5
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf5 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information5 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3539 |
Inf. 6
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf6 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information6 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3540 |
Inf. 7
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf7 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information7 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6093 |
Inf. 8
Additional product or structure information.
The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Inf. @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | Inf8 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | information8 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6094 |
Length
The length of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | LgtU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | length | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5901 |
Memo file name
The file name for the Memo attached to the product.
On the Editing menu, click Memo to create a new memo or to view the existing memo. The memo file name is saved in this text box.
Double-click or press * to open the Select file dialog box to manually select a memo file.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Memo file name | Text (260) |
| SQL name | NoteNm | The database field name. |
| API identifier | memoFileName | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4237 |
Memo no.
Link to the memo for the entry.
The actual memo is stored in the Memo table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Memo no. | Integer |
| SQL name | MemoNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | memoNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 19232 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Memo | Memo |
|
Net weight
The net weight of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | NWgtU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | netWeight | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2596 |
New product no.
The new number that the product will be assigned when you run the Change Product no. processing.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product no. | Text (40) |
| SQL name | NwProdNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | newProductNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 7363 |
Next serial no.
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | No. | Integer |
| SQL name | NxtSerNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | nextSerialNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 12707 |
Normal warehouse
The warehouse where the product usually is located.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | Yes | This field is visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Warehouse no. | Integer |
| SQL name | NrmStc | The database field name. |
| API identifier | normalWarehouseNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2594 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Warehouse | NormalWarehouse |
| ||
| Stock balance | NormalStockBalance |
| This is a combined foreign key. Making a lookup in one of the fields may also fill in value in the others. |
Organisational unit 1
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Organisational unit no. | Integer |
| SQL name | R1 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4587 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 1 | OrgUnit1 |
|
Organisational unit 2
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Organisational unit no. | Integer |
| SQL name | R2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4588 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 2 | OrgUnit2 |
|
Organisational unit 3
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Organisational unit no. | Integer |
| SQL name | R3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4589 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 3 | OrgUnit3 |
|
Organisational unit 4
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Organisational unit no. | Integer |
| SQL name | R4 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4590 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 4 | OrgUnit4 |
|
Organisational unit 5
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Organisational unit no. | Integer |
| SQL name | R5 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit5 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4591 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 5 | OrgUnit5 |
|
Organisational unit 6
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Organisational unit no. | Integer |
| SQL name | R6 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit6 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 4592 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 6 | OrgUnit6 |
|
Organisational unit 7
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Long alphanumeric organisational unit no. | Text (40) |
| SQL name | R7 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit7 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 9600 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 7 | OrgUnit7 |
|
Organisational unit 8
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Short alphanumeric organisational unit no. | Text (10) |
| SQL name | R8 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit8 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 9601 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 8 | OrgUnit8 |
|
Organisational unit 9
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Short alphanumeric organisational unit no. | Text (10) |
| SQL name | R9 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit9 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 9602 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 9 | OrgUnit9 |
|
Organisational unit 10
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Short alphanumeric organisational unit no. | Text (10) |
| SQL name | R10 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit10 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 9603 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 10 | OrgUnit10 |
|
Organisational unit 11
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Short alphanumeric organisational unit no. | Text (10) |
| SQL name | R11 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit11 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 9604 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 11 | OrgUnit11 |
|
Organisational unit 12
The organisational unit the product is assigned to.
The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Short alphanumeric organisational unit no. | Text (10) |
| SQL name | R12 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | orgUnit12 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 9605 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Organisational unit 12 | OrgUnit12 |
|
Period key
The period key to be transferred to the voucher line for accrual accounting of the sales and consumed goods accounts, e.g. products for rent and licence.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Period key | Integer |
| SQL name | PrK | The database field name. |
| API identifier | periodKeyNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 15866 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Period key | PeriodKey |
|
Picture file name
A link to the picture file for the product.
The picture file is copied from the from the product to the order line if the Copy picture from product check box on the Misc. page in the Proc. method 1 field is selected.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Picture file name | Text (260) |
| SQL name | PictNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | pictureFileName | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6625 |
Plan type
The invoice plan type, used for Invoicing according to plan.
The value is suggested in the Order line table and also used in invoice plan lines to show what type of line it is.
- 1 - On account
- This value can be selected if 1 - On account/settlement is selected in the Inv. according to plan field in the Order table.
- 2 - Fixed price
- 3 - Additional expenses
- 4 - Settlement
- There is to be a settlement invoice on the date specified, and the
fields for specifying what and how much you are to invoice will have no
significance.
This value can be selected if 1 - On account/settlement is selected in the Inv. according to plan field in the Order table.
- 5 - Invoiced on account
- This plan type is allocated automatically.
- 6 - Invoiced fixed price
- This plan type is allocated automatically.
- 7 - Invoiced additional expenses
- This plan type is allocated automatically.
- 8 - Invoiced settlement
- This plan type is allocated automatically.
- 9 - Settled on account
- This plan type is allocated automatically.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Plan type | Integer |
| SQL name | InvoPlLn | The database field name. |
| API identifier | planType | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3058 |
Previously product no.
The previous number if the product has been assigned a new number by running the Change Product no. processing.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product no. | Text (40) |
| SQL name | OldPNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | previouslyProductNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 7188 |
Price qty.
The number of units the price is valid for.
The price types which will be considered the price quantity in their calculations are defined in the Price quantity extent field in the Company information table. If the field is empty or has the value 1, the given price is used as the price per unit.
The price quantity cannot be changed if there are shipments linked to the product. You can only override the price quantity in order lines which are exempt from warehousing.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | PrNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | priceQuantity | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6173 |
Price unit
The unit measurement for which prices, cost prices and consignment costs are valid.
- 1 - Quantity in base unit
- 2 - Length
- 3 - Area
- 4 - Volume
- 5 - Net weight
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Price unit | Integer |
| SQL name | PrUn | The database field name. |
| API identifier | priceUnit | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6172 |
Proc. method 1
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 1 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProcMt | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2595 |
Proc. method 1b
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 1b | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM1b | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod1b | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6392 |
Proc. method 1c
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 1c | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM1c | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod1c | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6563 |
Proc. method 2
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 2 | Integer |
| SQL name | ExcPrint | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3663 |
Proc. method 2b
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 2b | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM2b | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod2b | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3671 |
Proc. method 2c
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 2c | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM2c | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod2c | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6564 |
Proc. method 3
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 3 | Integer |
| SQL name | EditPref | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2587 |
Proc. method 3b
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 3b | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM3b | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod3b | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6565 |
Proc. method 3c
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 3c | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM3c | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod3c | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6566 |
Proc. method 4
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 4 | Integer |
| SQL name | EdFmt | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2589 |
Proc. method 4b
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 4b | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM4b | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod4b | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6567 |
Proc. method 4c
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 4c | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM4c | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod4c | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6568 |
Proc. method 5
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 5 | Integer |
| SQL name | SpecFunc | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod5 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2586 |
Proc. method 5b
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 5b | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM5b | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod5b | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6569 |
Proc. method 5c
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 5c | Integer |
| SQL name | PrM5c | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod5c | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6570 |
Proc. method 6
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 6 | Integer |
| SQL name | ExpStr | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod6 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3670 |
Proc. method 7
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 7 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdPro | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod7 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 8306 |
Proc. method 8
Settings defining the behaviour of the product.
On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.
Warehousing
- Exempt from warehousing
- The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any
warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done
for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.
The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.
Note:If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.
Reservation method
- Reserve on save
- The quantity will be reserved when you save.
- Reserve from given shipment
- The reservation on the order will only take place from this
shipment.
When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.
This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.
If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.
- Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
- This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
- Suggest shipment no. 1
- Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on
order lines. Tip:If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.Note:This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
- No reservation on goods received
- Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.
- (From the Structure table)
- Reserve available quantity
- Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
- The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
- Meet reservations req. even if not available
- This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.
Picking method
- Pick complete order line
- If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
- Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
- No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
- Picking after invoicing
- This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until
invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and
you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create
reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of
on finishing/invoicing:
- Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
- Shipments.
- Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.Note:There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.Note:Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:- One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
- One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:- 9 - Order processing
- 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
- Finish picked quantity with menu choice
- You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
- Keep reservations even if picking less
- No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Exception
- Allow non-existent shipment numbers
- A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
- Do not process shipments in FIFO order
- Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
- Add shipments with negative availability
- Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a
balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This
also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.Note:You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.Note:In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.
Serial number
Reservation
- One shipment per unit at stock increase
- You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
- One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
- You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One
reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales
order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.
Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.
- Reserve serial no. at picking
- By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
- Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
- The value in the Finish NOW field in the
order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the
serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is
reduced.Note:If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.
Reject
- Duplicate serial no.
- You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
- Non-existent serial no.
- A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.
Structure
Structure head
- Product is structure head
Expand structure on transaction type
- Sales
- Hire
- Loan
- Adjustment/internal issue
- Further processing
- Purchase
- Production
- Stock transfer
Picking of structures
- (From the Structure table)
- Pick individual structure lines
- Pick same fraction of structure lines
- The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
- Pick complete structure
- The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
- Distribute amounts on structure lines
- The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure
lines when the structure is expanded.
- Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
- Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
- Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
- Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
- Finish structure line from structure head
- You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
- Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
- The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.
Structure lines
Accumulate in structure head
- Revenue
- Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
- Sales costs
- The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
- Production costs
- Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
- Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
- The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
- Add lead time from structure head
- The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
- Expand substructure
- Display the substructures in the order lines.
- Raw material
Prices
Do not get
- Sales price
- The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on sale
- The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
- Cost price on production
- The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.
Resuggesting price
- Do not resuggest price/discount
- No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the
sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in
the Price field.
Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is
on.Note:This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
- Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
- Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set
Discount calculation
- Do not calculate discount from standard price
- You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
- Suggest price after discount and rounding
- The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
- Exempt from total discount
- No total discount is calculated for such order lines.
Quantity and price calculation
- Calculate price from quantity format
- The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
- Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
- The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
- Share calculated from total incurred costs
- The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.
Cost price calculation
- Get cost price from price and discount matrix
- The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
- Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
- You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
- Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
- The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.
The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.
- Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
- The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.
Visma.net settings
- Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders
Editing
Quantity format
- (From the Structure table)
- Quantity
- Hours and minutes
- Start and end date exclusive
- Start and end date inclusive
- Factors
Quantity calculation
- Do not suggest incurred as quantity
- You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
- Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
- You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
- Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
- There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
- Exchange arrangement
Enter
- Description
- The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
- From and to/factors
- The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.
Restrictions
Exempt from
- Returning
- Finishing
- Acceptance
- Invoice received
- Goods received
- Sent from supplier
- Purchase confirmation
- Recalculate prices
- Cancelling
- Order generation
- The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
- Calc. of additional cost
- The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs
from the order head.
If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the menu item.
Note:This does not apply for cost calculation.Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.
Mandatory fields
- Locations on increase
- Disregard mandatory fields
- If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.
Processing methods
- Processing methods locked
Printout
Include on pick list
- (From the Structure table)
- The order line
- The structure
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
- The order
- Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
Suppress
- Product no.
- Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
- Quantity
- Quantity will be hidden.
- Price and discount
- Price and Discount will be hidden.
- Amount
- Amount will be hidden.
- Cost price and cost
- Cost price and cost will be hidden.
- Requested delivery date
- Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Confirmed delivery date
- Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Other dates
- Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
- Memo
- Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.
Excluded on
- Invoices/credit notes
- The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.
- Consignment notes
- The order line is excluded on consignment notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Packing slips
- The order line is excluded on packing slips.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Pick lists
- The order line is excluded on pick lists.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Delivery notes
- The order line is excluded on delivery notes.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Order confirmations
- The order line is excluded on order confirmations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Quotations
- The order line is excluded on quotations.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Purchase orders
- The order line is excluded on purchase orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Inquiries
- The order line is excluded on inquiries.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- Production orders
- The order line is excluded on production orders.
Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.
- If 0
- The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.Tip:This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.
Post processing
Do not include totals
- Revenue
- You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the
structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in
both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions
can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order
head.Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Sales costs
- You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Production costs
- You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group
totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and
structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs
are accumulated in the structure head. Note:Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
- Weight and Volume
- You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.
Exclude from accounting
- Revenue
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
- Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
- If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
- Production costs
- If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to
accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from
posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue,
it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for
sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs
are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general
ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in
structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the
structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have
different tax and accounting groups and account sets.Note:Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.
Exclude from statistics
- Revenue
- The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product
transactions. Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Sales costs
- The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product
transactions.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
- Production costs
- The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product
transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and
cost price etc.Note:If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Other accounting rules
- Post temp. stock value
- You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
- Accrual accounting to end of year
- You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale
from the sales date until 31.12.Note:This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.
Misc.
Group processing
- (From the Structure table)
- None
- Group discount
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
- Group total
- You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Time to next invoice
- Weeks instead of months
- If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
- Always last day of month
- A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
- Use Quarter Days
- Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
- One line per time unit
- If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
- No stock handling on new line
- If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.
Misc.
- Product free of interest
- The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
- Purchase product
- You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
- Suspended
- Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if
the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as
"deleted".
The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.
Memos and pictures
- Copy memo from product
- The memo from the Product table is copied
to the order lines so that it appears in the order.Note:If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.
If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.
- Copy memo from structure
- The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
- Copy picture from product
- The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
External
External processing
- Show on Web
- This product will be shown in Zpider.
- Exclude from CRM
- This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
- Exclude from external system
- Exclude from Visma Mobile
- Exclude from Visma On Demand
Appointment
Agreement rules
- Appointment product
- Calculate full time over midnight
Update balance rules
- Do not update invoiceable
- The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update incurred
- The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Do not update reserved
- The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
- Update overtime
- The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table
is updated.
Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Note:Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no. - Update flex correction
- The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.
Approval rules
- Approve disabled
- The Appointment cannot be
approved.Note:Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
- Requires approval by responsible
- The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
- Ignore credit check
- The Appointment is excluded from credit control.
Transfer to order rules
- Enabled
- Disabled
- Allow uncompleted
- Must approve time schedule
- Copy case number
- This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
- Cost only
- The price will not be transferred to an order line.
- Get new price from price matrix
- New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.
Booking rules
- Block overbooking
- You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
- Suppress partly booked message
- You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Proc. method 8 | Integer |
| SQL name | AgrProc | The database field name. |
| API identifier | processingMethod8 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 12432 |
Product category 1
The product category for the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product category | Integer |
| SQL name | PrCatNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productCategoryNo1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 8466 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product category | ProductCategory1 |
|
Product category 2
The product category for the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product category | Integer |
| SQL name | PrCatNo2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productCategoryNo2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 8468 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product category | ProductCategory2 |
|
Product category 3
The product category for the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product category | Integer |
| SQL name | PrCatNo3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productCategoryNo3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11970 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product category | ProductCategory3 |
|
Product category 4
The product category for the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product category | Integer |
| SQL name | PrCatNo4 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productCategoryNo4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11971 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product category | ProductCategory4 |
|
Product category 5
The product category for the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product category | Integer |
| SQL name | PrCatNo5 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productCategoryNo5 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11972 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product category | ProductCategory5 |
|
Product category 6
The product category for the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product category | Integer |
| SQL name | PrCatNo6 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productCategoryNo6 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11973 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product category | ProductCategory6 |
|
Product is structure head
The product is a structure head.
This field is a visualisation of the Product is structure head check box on the Structure page in the Proc. method 1 field.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Boolean | Integer |
| Memory field | Yes | The value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database. |
| API identifier | productIsStructureHead | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 16451 |
Product no.
A unique number identifying the product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | Yes | This field is visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product no. | Text (40) |
| Primary key | Yes | Product no. |
| SQL name | ProdNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2578 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Stock balance | NormalStockBalance |
| This is a combined foreign key. Making a lookup in one of the fields may also fill in value in the others. |
Product price gr. 1
A group to which the product belongs. The value is used for looking up in the price and discount matrix.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product price group 1 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdPrGr | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productPriceGroup1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2585 |
Product price gr. 2
A group to which the product belongs. The value is used for looking up in the price and discount matrix.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product price group 2 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdPrG2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productPriceGroup2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3076 |
Product price gr. 3
A group to which the product belongs. The value is used for looking up in the price and discount matrix.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product price group 3 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdPrG3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productPriceGroup3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3077 |
Product template
The template product. If you enter a product number in this field, values are suggested from the template product. Already filled in values are not overridden.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product no. | Text (40) |
| Memory field | Yes | The value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database. |
| API identifier | templateProductNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 8749 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product | ProductTemplate |
| ||
| Search product | SearchProductTemplate |
|
Product type 1
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product type 1 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdTp | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productType1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2581 |
Product type 2
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product type 2 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdTp2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productType2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5025 |
Product type 3
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product type 3 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdTp3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productType3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6103 |
Product type 4
A group to which the product belongs.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product type 4 | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdTp4 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | productType4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6104 |
Quantity per unit
The quantity of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | StUnRt | The database field name. |
| API identifier | quantityPerUnit | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5990 |
Repl. product
The replacement product. When you type the product number in the order line, the number is automatically replaced with this replacement product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Product no. | Text (40) |
| SQL name | RepProd | The database field name. |
| API identifier | replacementProductNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2602 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Product | ReplacementProduct |
| ||
| Search product | ReplacementSearchProduct |
|
Required margin
The target margin for the product.
This field can be used in order registration as an information. There is no further logic on this field.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Margin | Decimal |
| SQL name | DesMrg | The database field name. |
| API identifier | requiredMargin | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2592 |
Responsible
The employee responsible for keeping the product information up to date.
The Empl. no. is a unique number identifying one specific Employee.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Empl. no. | Integer |
| SQL name | Rsp | The database field name. |
| API identifier | official1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 3074 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Associate | Official1 |
|
Responsible 2
The employee responsible for keeping the product information up to date.
The Empl. no. is a unique number identifying one specific Employee.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Empl. no. | Integer |
| SQL name | Rsp2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | official2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6122 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Associate | Official2 |
|
Rounding amount
The truncate amount for the product.
If you select the Suggest price after discount and rounding check box in the Proc. method 1 field, the net price is rounded off to the nearest amount divisible by the entered truncate amount for the product. This requires that you do not save between entering the product number and referring to the price and discount matrix.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Amount | Decimal |
| SQL name | TrAm | The database field name. |
| API identifier | roundingAmount | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6402 |
Sales price addition %
The percentage by which you want the prices to rise.
If an order number and product number are entered in the voucher line, using a voucher type having selected 1 - Update order in the Update order field, an order line will be added to the order when updating the voucher. Domestic amount from voucher line will be used as price on order line, raised with the percentage from this field.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Percent | Decimal |
| SQL name | SPrAdd | The database field name. |
| API identifier | salesPriceAddition | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 7210 |
Scan doc. no.
The ID of the scanned document.
Is used in connection with Visma Document Center.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | No. | Integer |
| SQL name | PLDNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | scanDocumentNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11184 |
Scan status
The status of the scanned document.
Is used in connection with Visma Document Center.
- 1 - Scanned document
- 2 - Document on flow
- 4 - Document finished
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Scan status | Integer |
| SQL name | PLDFlow | The database field name. |
| API identifier | scanStatus | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11185 |
Show on Web
The information about the product is presented on the web.
This field is a visualisation of the Show on Web check box on the External page in the Proc. method 7 field.
The field is intended for use in the Zpider solution.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Boolean | Integer |
| Memory field | Yes | The value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database. |
| API identifier | showOnWeb | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 8307 |
Source country
The Country of origin for the Product.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Country no. | Integer |
| SQL name | SrcCtry | The database field name. |
| API identifier | sourceCountryNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 18138 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Country | SourceCountry |
|
Stock measure
The display unit of stock values.
When joining the Stock balance, Shipment or Stock change tables to the order lines, the stock level fields, cost prices and consignment costs are recalculated according to the value in this field.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
- 1 - Quantity in base unit
- 2 - Length
- 3 - Area
- 4 - Volume
- 5 - Net weight
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Stock measure | Integer |
| SQL name | Measure | The database field name. |
| API identifier | stockMeasure | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5955 |
Suspended
The product is no longer in use.
Suspended is set automatically when updating a product from Incoming product data that the supplier wants deleted. It may also be set manually. The field is a visualisation of the processing method Suspended.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Boolean | Integer |
| Memory field | Yes | The value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database. |
| API identifier | suspended | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 18458 |
Tare
The packaging weight of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
Allows prices and discounts to be specified not only on the basis of the ordinary quantity field but also the Tare field.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | TareU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | tare | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2597 |
To
Used in conjunction with the From field for calculating the quantity.
When the quantity is calculated as the difference between to and from, it can be expressed as a quantity, time, date or factor, depending on the quantity format selected on the Editing page in the Proc. method 1 field in the Order line table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | ToNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | to | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5047 |
Trans. information 1
Optional field for additional information.
This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Trans. information @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | TrInf1 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | transactionInformation1 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6113 |
Trans. information 2
Optional field for additional information.
This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Trans. information @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | TrInf2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | transactionInformation2 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6114 |
Trans. information 3
Optional field for additional information.
This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Trans. information @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | TrInf3 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | transactionInformation3 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 7078 |
Trans. information 4
Optional field for additional information.
This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Trans. information @ | Text (40) |
| SQL name | TrInf4 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | transactionInformation4 | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 7079 |
Transaction type
The transaction type for the product defining the way the goods move in or out of the warehouse.
- 1 - Sales
- Normal sale.
The goods move out of the warehouse.
- 2 - Hire
- Hire against payment.
The goods move out of the warehouse.
- 3 - Loan
- Loan of goods without payment.
The goods move out of the warehouse.
- 4 - Adjustment/internal issue
- Registration of goods that have been lost.
The goods move out of the warehouse.
- 5 - Further processing
- Internal consumption of goods for further processing.
The goods move out of the warehouse.
- 6 - Purchase
- Goods that are purchased from other parties.
The goods move into of the warehouse.
- 7 - Production
- Goods produced by the company itself.
The goods move into of the warehouse.
- 8 - Stock transfer
- Transfer of stock between the company's own warehouses.
You can also use this transaction type when performing a stock transfer of unrealised transactions. It is not possible to reserve or finish inflow transactions on stock transfer orders.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Transaction type | Integer |
| SQL name | TrTp | The database field name. |
| API identifier | transactionType | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 6399 |
UNSPSC no.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | String of length 12 | Text (12) |
| SQL name | UnspscNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | unspscNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 19692 |
VAT and accounting group
The VAT and accounting group for the product that controls tax processing and determines which accounts and organisational units are used for accounting.
Together with the account set on the Order line, this field refers to the VAT- and accounting information table.
If you do not complete this field in the Product table, the Default VAT and accounting group is retrieved from the Company information table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | Yes | This field is visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | VAT and accounting group | Integer |
| SQL name | ProdGr | The database field name. |
| API identifier | taxAndAccountingGroup | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2580 |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| VAT and accounting group | TaxAndAccGroup |
|
Visma ID
The ID of the scanned document.
Is used in connection with Visma Document Center.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | No. | Integer |
| SQL name | WfId | The database field name. |
| API identifier | vismaId | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 11183 |
Volume
The volume of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
This field allows prices and discounts to be specified not only on the basis of the ordinary Quantity field but also the Volume field. This field is totalled in the order head in order to be able to calculate the order's total volume.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | VolU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | volume | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2598 |
Wage rate no.
The rate to be used for the wage sort in the transfer to the wage file.
The value is transferred to the Appointment table. It will be used when appointments are exported to file and sent to the wage system.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Wage rate no. | Integer |
| SQL name | WageRtNo | The database field name. |
| API identifier | payrollRateNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 13772 |
Wage sort
The type of wage used in the transfer to the wage file.
The value is transferred to the Appointment table. It will be used when appointments are exported to file and sent to the wage system.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Wage sort | Text (10) |
| SQL name | WageSrt | The database field name. |
| API identifier | payrollSort | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 2591 |
Web page
The address of a web page for the product.
Double-click or press * to open the web page in your web browser.
Alternatively the field can be used to refer to documents or other files. Double-click or press * in the empty field to open the Select file dialog box.
On the Design tab, in the Insert group, you can click on Web page to visualise the document or web page on the screen.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Web page | Text (260) |
| SQL name | WebPg2 | The database field name. |
| API identifier | webPage | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 8731 |
Width
The width of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.
The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Quantity | Decimal |
| SQL name | WdtU | The database field name. |
| API identifier | width | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | 5902 |
Control columns
Control columns include information about who has changed the record last and when, and which process that is currently editing the record.
Changed by provenance
The provenance for the record change.
A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
0 - None
1 - UI
10 - External API
20 - GAiA
21 - AI Connect
100 - Internal service
101 - Task automation
102 - AutoInvoice download
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Provenance | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | ChPvn | The database field name. |
| API identifier | changedByProvenance | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Changed by user
The name of the user that changed the record.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | User name | Text (24) |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | ChUsr | The database field name. |
| API identifier | changedByUser | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Changed date
The date when the record was changed.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Date | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | ChDt | The database field name. |
| API identifier | changedDate | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Changed time
The time when the record was changed.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Time | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | ChTm | The database field name. |
| API identifier | changedTime | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Changed time stamp
The date and time when the record was changed.
The field is updated with the UTC time.
This value can be used by external systems to replicate changed data. The column is indexed.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Date/time | DateTime |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | ChTs | The database field name. |
| API identifier | changedTimestamp | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Created by provenance
The provenance for the record creation.
A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
0 - None
1 - UI
10 - External API
20 - GAiA
21 - AI Connect
100 - Internal service
101 - Task automation
102 - AutoInvoice download
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Provenance | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | CrePvn | The database field name. |
| API identifier | createdByProvenance | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Created by user
The name of the user that created the record.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | User name | Text (24) |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | CreUsr | The database field name. |
| API identifier | createdByUser | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Created date
The date when the record was created.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Date | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | CreDt | The database field name. |
| API identifier | createdDate | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Created time
The time when the record was created.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Time | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | CreTm | The database field name. |
| API identifier | createdTime | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Created time stamp
The date and time when the record was created.
The field is updated with the UTC time.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Date/time | DateTime |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | CreTs | The database field name. |
| API identifier | createdTimestamp | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Edit status
The current status of the record.
A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
0 - Unchanged: The record is read, but not changed.
1 - Inserted: The record is new.
2 - Changed: The record is changed.
3 - Deleted: The record is deleted.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Edit status | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | LckSt | The database field name. |
| API identifier | editStatus | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
Process no
The Process no. from the Active company process table which is currently using or has control of this record.
| Property | Value | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Visible by default | No | This field is not visible by default in the table display. |
| Domain | Process no. | Integer |
| Write Access | None | You are not allowed to modify the value in this field. |
| SQL name | ChPrc | The database field name. |
| API identifier | lockedByProcessNo | The API identifier used in GraphQL. |
| Number | A unique column number. |
| To table | Purpose | From columns | To columns | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Active company process | CompanyProcess | Process no. | Process no. |